Add missing SVN eol-style property to files where it was missing.

15 files changed, 4864 insertions, 4864 deletions

diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c
index eaf80d9cb..bf6b35928 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.c
@@ -1,321 +1,321 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special

- *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine

- *  the device's capabilities and functions.

- */

-

-#include "Descriptors.h"

-

-/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as

- * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.

- * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated

- * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices

- * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value

- * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and

- * port location).

- */

-#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)

-	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.

-#endif

-

-/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall

- *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the

- *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration

- *  process begins.

- */

-const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},

-

-	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),

-	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,

-	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,

-	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,

-

-	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,

-

-	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,

-	.ProductID              = 0x2068,

-	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(00.01),

-

-	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,

-	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,

-	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,

-

-	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS

-};

-

-/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage

- *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces

- *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting

- *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.

- */

-const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =

-{

-	.Config =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},

-

-			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),

-			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,

-

-			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,

-			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,

-

-			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),

-

-			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)

-		},

-

-	.CDC_IAD =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},

-

-			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,

-			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,

-

-			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,

-			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,

-			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,

-

-			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR

-		},

-

-	.CDC_CCI_Interface =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},

-

-			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,

-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,

-

-			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,

-

-			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,

-			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,

-			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,

-

-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR

-		},

-

-	.CDC_Functional_Header =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},

-			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,

-

-			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),

-		},

-

-	.CDC_Functional_ACM =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},

-			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,

-

-			.Capabilities           = 0x06,

-		},

-

-	.CDC_Functional_Union =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},

-			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,

-

-			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = 0,

-			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = 1,

-		},

-

-	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF

-		},

-

-	.CDC_DCI_Interface =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},

-

-			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,

-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,

-

-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,

-

-			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,

-			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,

-			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,

-

-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR

-		},

-

-	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01

-		},

-

-	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01

-		},

-

-	.MS_Interface =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},

-

-			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,

-			.AlternateSetting       = 0,

-

-			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,

-

-			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,

-			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,

-			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,

-

-			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR

-		},

-

-	.MS_DataInEndpoint =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01

-		},

-

-	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =

-		{

-			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},

-

-			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),

-			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),

-			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,

-			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01

-		}

-};

-

-/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests

- *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate

- *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.

- */

-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},

-

-	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}

-};

-

-/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable

- *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device

- *  Descriptor.

- */

-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},

-

-	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"

-};

-

-/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,

- *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device

- *  Descriptor.

- */

-const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =

-{

-	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(30), .Type = DTYPE_String},

-

-	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC and Mass Storage Demo"

-};

-

-/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"

- *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given

- *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function

- *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the

- *  USB host.

- */

-uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,

-                                    const uint8_t wIndex,

-                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)

-{

-	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);

-	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);

-

-	const void* Address = NULL;

-	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;

-

-	switch (DescriptorType)

-	{

-		case DTYPE_Device:

-			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;

-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);

-			break;

-		case DTYPE_Configuration:

-			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;

-			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);

-			break;

-		case DTYPE_String:

-			switch (DescriptorNumber)

-			{

-				case 0x00:

-					Address = &LanguageString;

-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);

-					break;

-				case 0x01:

-					Address = &ManufacturerString;

-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);

-					break;

-				case 0x02:

-					Address = &ProductString;

-					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);

-					break;

-			}

-

-			break;

-	}

-

-	*DescriptorAddress = Address;

-	return Size;

-}

-

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2068,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(00.01),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = 0x01,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = 0x02,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_BUSPOWERED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = 0,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 0,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(01.10),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = 0,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = 1,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 1,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | CDC_RX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | CDC_TX_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = 2,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN | MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = (ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_OUT | MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM),
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x01
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(11), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"Dean Camera"
+};
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(30), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = L"LUFA CDC and Mass Storage Demo"
+};
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case 0x00:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x01:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case 0x02:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h
index 3beea74b9..594b65bb9 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Descriptors.h
@@ -1,104 +1,104 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for Descriptors.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_

-#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         1

-

-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   2

-

-		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   3

-

-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */

-		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8

-

-		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */

-		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16

-

-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */

-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          4

-

-		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */

-		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         5

-

-		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */

-		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64

-

-	/* Type Defines: */

-		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the

-		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which

-		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.

-		 */

-		typedef struct

-		{

-			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;

-

-			// CDC Control Interface

-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC_IAD;

-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;

-			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;

-			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;

-			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;

-

-			// CDC Data Interface

-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;

-

-			// Mass Storage Interface

-			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               MS_Interface;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataInEndpoint;

-			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataOutEndpoint;

-		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,

-		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,

-		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)

-		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-

-#endif

-

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM         1
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPNUM                   2
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPNUM                   3
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM          4
+
+		/** Endpoint number of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM         5
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t   CDC_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf
index bc4360c62..767874f71 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Doxygen.conf
@@ -1,1565 +1,1565 @@
-# Doxyfile 1.6.2

-

-# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system

-# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project

-#

-# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored

-# The format is:

-#       TAG = value [value, ...]

-# For lists items can also be appended using:

-#       TAG += value [value, ...]

-# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Project related configuration options

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file

-# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all

-# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the

-# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See

-# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.

-

-DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8

-

-# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded

-# by quotes) that should identify the project.

-

-PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Device Demo"

-

-# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.

-# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or

-# if some version control system is used.

-

-PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0

-

-# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)

-# base path where the generated documentation will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location

-# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.

-

-OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/

-

-# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create

-# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output

-# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.

-# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of

-# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would

-# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.

-

-CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO

-

-# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all

-# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this

-# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.

-# The default language is English, other supported languages are:

-# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,

-# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,

-# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English

-# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,

-# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,

-# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.

-

-OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English

-

-# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in

-# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).

-# Set to NO to disable this.

-

-BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES

-

-# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend

-# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.

-# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the

-# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.

-

-REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES

-

-# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator

-# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string

-# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be

-# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is

-# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.

-# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically

-# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"

-# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"

-# "represents" "a" "an" "the"

-

-ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \

-                         "The $name widget" \

-                         "The $name file" \

-                         is \

-                         provides \

-                         specifies \

-                         contains \

-                         represents \

-                         a \

-                         an \

-                         the

-

-# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then

-# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief

-# description.

-

-ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO

-

-# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all

-# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those

-# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment

-# operators of the base classes will not be shown.

-

-INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO

-

-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full

-# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set

-# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.

-

-FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES

-

-# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag

-# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is

-# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of

-# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.

-# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the

-# path to strip.

-

-STRIP_FROM_PATH        =

-

-# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of

-# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells

-# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.

-# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class

-# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that

-# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.

-

-STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =

-

-# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter

-# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems

-# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.

-

-SHORT_NAMES            = YES

-

-# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen

-# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style

-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc

-# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments

-# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)

-

-JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO

-

-# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will

-# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style

-# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments

-# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring

-# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)

-

-QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO

-

-# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen

-# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///

-# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.

-# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed

-# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.

-

-MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO

-

-# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented

-# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it

-# re-implements.

-

-INHERIT_DOCS           = YES

-

-# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce

-# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will

-# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.

-

-SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO

-

-# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.

-# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.

-

-TAB_SIZE               = 4

-

-# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts

-# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".

-# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to

-# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which

-# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".

-# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.

-

-ALIASES                =

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.

-# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list

-# of all members will be omitted, etc.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for

-# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified

-# scopes will look different, etc.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran

-# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for

-# Fortran.

-

-OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO

-

-# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL

-# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for

-# VHDL.

-

-OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO

-

-# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.

-# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.

-# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.

-# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of

-# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,

-# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat

-# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),

-# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.

-

-EXTENSION_MAPPING      =

-

-# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want

-# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should

-# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and

-# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.

-# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration

-# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.

-

-BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO

-

-# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to

-# enable parsing support.

-

-CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO

-

-# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.

-# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public

-# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.

-

-SIP_SUPPORT            = NO

-

-# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter

-# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)

-# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the

-# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or

-# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the

-# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.

-

-IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES

-

-# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC

-# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first

-# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default

-# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.

-

-DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO

-

-# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of

-# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a

-# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to

-# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using

-# the \nosubgrouping command.

-

-SUBGROUPING            = YES

-

-# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum

-# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So

-# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct

-# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,

-# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically

-# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound

-# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.

-

-TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO

-

-# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to

-# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.

-# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.

-# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is

-# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause

-# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time

-# causing a significant performance penality.

-# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the

-# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on

-# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the

-# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:

-# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,

-# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols

-

-SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Build related configuration options

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in

-# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.

-# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless

-# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES

-

-EXTRACT_ALL            = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class

-# will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file

-# will be included in the documentation.

-

-EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES

-

-# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)

-# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.

-# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.

-

-EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES

-

-# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local

-# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in

-# the interface are included in the documentation.

-# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.

-

-EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO

-

-# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be

-# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called

-# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base

-# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default

-# anonymous namespace are hidden.

-

-EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.

-# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the

-# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.

-# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.

-# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various

-# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all

-# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.

-# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the

-# documentation.

-

-HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any

-# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.

-# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the

-# function's detailed documentation block.

-

-HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO

-

-# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation

-# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set

-# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.

-# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.

-

-INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO

-

-# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate

-# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also

-# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ

-# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows

-# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.

-

-CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen

-# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the

-# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.

-

-HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen

-# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation

-# of that file.

-

-SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES

-

-# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen

-# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation

-# rather than with sharp brackets.

-

-FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO

-

-# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]

-# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.

-

-INLINE_INFO            = YES

-

-# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen

-# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members

-# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in

-# declaration order.

-

-SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES

-

-# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the

-# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically

-# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in

-# declaration order.

-

-SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO

-

-# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.

-

-SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO

-

-# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the

-# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)

-# the group names will appear in their defined order.

-

-SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO

-

-# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be

-# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to

-# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,

-# not including the namespace part.

-# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.

-# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the

-# alphabetical list.

-

-SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug

-# commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO

-

-# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or

-# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting

-# \deprecated commands in the documentation.

-

-GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES

-

-# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional

-# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.

-

-ENABLED_SECTIONS       =

-

-# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines

-# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in

-# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified

-# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.

-# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the

-# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer

-# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.

-

-MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30

-

-# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated

-# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the

-# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.

-

-SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES

-

-# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories

-# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy

-# in the documentation. The default is NO.

-

-SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES

-

-# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.

-# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the

-# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.

-

-SHOW_FILES             = YES

-

-# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the

-# Namespaces page.

-# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index

-# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.

-

-SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES

-

-# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that

-# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from

-# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via

-# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of

-# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file

-# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output

-# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.

-

-FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =

-

-# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by

-# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files

-# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents

-# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a

-# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name

-# of the layout file.

-

-LAYOUT_FILE            =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to warning and progress messages

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated

-# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.

-

-QUIET                  = YES

-

-# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are

-# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank

-# NO is used.

-

-WARNINGS               = YES

-

-# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings

-# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will

-# automatically be disabled.

-

-WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES

-

-# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for

-# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some

-# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that

-# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.

-

-WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES

-

-# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for

-# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters

-# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about

-# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of

-# documentation.

-

-WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES

-

-# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that

-# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text

-# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the

-# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain

-# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could

-# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)

-

-WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"

-

-# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning

-# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written

-# to stderr.

-

-WARN_LOGFILE           =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the input files

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain

-# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or

-# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories

-# with spaces.

-

-INPUT                  = ./

-

-# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files

-# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is

-# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built

-# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for

-# the list of possible encodings.

-

-INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8

-

-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the

-# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp

-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left

-# blank the following patterns are tested:

-# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx

-# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90

-

-FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \

-                         *.c \

-                         *.txt

-

-# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories

-# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.

-# If left blank NO is used.

-

-RECURSIVE              = YES

-

-# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should

-# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a

-# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.

-

-EXCLUDE                = Documentation/

-

-# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or

-# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded

-# from the input.

-

-EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO

-

-# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the

-# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude

-# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched

-# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories

-# for example use the pattern */test/*

-

-EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 

-

-# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names

-# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the

-# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the

-# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,

-# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test

-

-EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \

-                         INCLUDE_FROM_*

-

-# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or

-# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see

-# the \include command).

-

-EXAMPLE_PATH           =

-

-# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the

-# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp

-# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left

-# blank all files are included.

-

-EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *

-

-# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be

-# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude

-# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.

-# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.

-

-EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO

-

-# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or

-# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see

-# the \image command).

-

-IMAGE_PATH             =

-

-# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should

-# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program

-# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>

-# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an

-# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes

-# to standard output.

-# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be

-# ignored.

-

-INPUT_FILTER           =

-

-# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern

-# basis.

-# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the

-# filter if there is a match.

-# The filters are a list of the form:

-# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further

-# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER

-# is applied to all files.

-

-FILTER_PATTERNS        =

-

-# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using

-# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source

-# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).

-

-FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to source browsing

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will

-# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.

-# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also

-# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.

-

-SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO

-

-# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body

-# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.

-

-INLINE_SOURCES         = NO

-

-# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct

-# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code

-# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.

-

-STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES

-

-# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES

-# then for each documented function all documented

-# functions referencing it will be listed.

-

-REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO

-

-# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES

-# then for each documented function all documented entities

-# called/used by that function will be listed.

-

-REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO

-

-# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)

-# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from

-# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will

-# link to the source code.

-# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.

-

-REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO

-

-# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code

-# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen

-# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source

-# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You

-# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.

-

-USE_HTAGS              = NO

-

-# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen

-# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for

-# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.

-

-VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index

-# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project

-# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.

-

-ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES

-

-# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then

-# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns

-# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])

-

-COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5

-

-# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all

-# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.

-# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that

-# should be ignored while generating the index headers.

-

-IGNORE_PREFIX          =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the HTML output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate HTML output.

-

-GENERATE_HTML          = YES

-

-# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.

-

-HTML_OUTPUT            = html

-

-# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for

-# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank

-# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.

-

-HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html

-

-# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for

-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard header.

-

-HTML_HEADER            =

-

-# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for

-# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard footer.

-

-HTML_FOOTER            =

-

-# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading

-# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to

-# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen

-# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy

-# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own

-# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!

-

-HTML_STYLESHEET        =

-

-# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML

-# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting

-# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.

-

-HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO

-

-# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,

-# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to

-# NO a bullet list will be used.

-

-HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES

-

-# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML

-# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the

-# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports

-# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox

-# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).

-

-HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES

-

-# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files

-# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3

-# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).

-# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the

-# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that

-# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in

-# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find

-# it at startup.

-# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.

-

-GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO

-

-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the

-# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple

-# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)

-# can be grouped.

-

-DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"

-

-# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that

-# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a

-# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen

-# will append .docset to the name.

-

-DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files

-# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the

-# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)

-# of the generated HTML documentation.

-

-GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can

-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You

-# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be

-# written to the html output directory.

-

-CHM_FILE               =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can

-# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of

-# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run

-# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.

-

-HHC_LOCATION           =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag

-# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that

-# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).

-

-GENERATE_CHI           = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING

-# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file

-# content.

-

-CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =

-

-# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag

-# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a

-# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.

-

-BINARY_TOC             = NO

-

-# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members

-# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.

-

-TOC_EXPAND             = YES

-

-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER

-# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for

-# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated

-# HTML documentation.

-

-GENERATE_QHP           = NO

-

-# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can

-# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.

-# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.

-

-QCH_FILE               =

-

-# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating

-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace

-

-QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating

-# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders

-

-QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc

-

-# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.

-# For more information please see

-# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters

-

-QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =

-

-# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see

-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.

-

-QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =

-

-# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's

-# filter section matches.

-# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.

-

-QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =

-

-# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can

-# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.

-# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated

-# .qhp file.

-

-QHG_LOCATION           =

-

-# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files

-#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help

-#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents

-# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML

-# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of

-# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as

-# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.

-

-GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO

-

-# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin

-# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have

-# this name.

-

-ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project

-

-# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at

-# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and

-# the value YES disables it.

-

-DISABLE_INDEX          = NO

-

-# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])

-# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.

-

-ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1

-

-# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index

-# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.

-# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated

-# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that

-# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports

-# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).

-# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.

-

-GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES

-

-# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,

-# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.

-

-USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO

-

-# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be

-# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree

-# is shown.

-

-TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250

-

-# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included

-# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that

-# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need

-# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory

-# to force them to be regenerated.

-

-FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10

-

-# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript

-# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should

-# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine

-# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.

-

-SEARCHENGINE           = NO

-

-# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index

-# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup

-# and does not have live searching capabilities.

-

-SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the LaTeX output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate Latex output.

-

-GENERATE_LATEX         = NO

-

-# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.

-

-LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex

-

-# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be

-# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.

-# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for

-# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the

-# Makefile that is written to the output directory.

-

-LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex

-

-# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to

-# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the

-# default command name.

-

-MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex

-

-# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact

-# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to

-# save some trees in general.

-

-COMPACT_LATEX          = NO

-

-# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used

-# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and

-# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.

-

-PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide

-

-# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX

-# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.

-

-EXTRA_PACKAGES         =

-

-# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for

-# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until

-# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a

-# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!

-

-LATEX_HEADER           =

-

-# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated

-# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will

-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references

-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.

-

-PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES

-

-# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of

-# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a

-# higher quality PDF documentation.

-

-USE_PDFLATEX           = YES

-

-# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.

-# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep

-# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.

-# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.

-

-LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO

-

-# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not

-# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)

-# in the output.

-

-LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO

-

-# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.

-

-LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the RTF output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output

-# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with

-# other RTF readers or editors.

-

-GENERATE_RTF           = NO

-

-# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.

-

-RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf

-

-# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact

-# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to

-# save some trees in general.

-

-COMPACT_RTF            = NO

-

-# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated

-# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will

-# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.

-# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other

-# programs which support those fields.

-# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.

-

-RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO

-

-# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's

-# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide

-# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.

-

-RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =

-

-# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.

-# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.

-

-RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the man page output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate man pages

-

-GENERATE_MAN           = NO

-

-# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.

-

-MAN_OUTPUT             = man

-

-# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to

-# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)

-

-MAN_EXTENSION          = .3

-

-# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,

-# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity

-# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files

-# only source the real man page, but without them the man command

-# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.

-

-MAN_LINKS              = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the XML output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate an XML file that captures the structure of

-# the code including all documentation.

-

-GENERATE_XML           = NO

-

-# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.

-# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be

-# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.

-

-XML_OUTPUT             = xml

-

-# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,

-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the

-# syntax of the XML files.

-

-XML_SCHEMA             =

-

-# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,

-# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the

-# syntax of the XML files.

-

-XML_DTD                =

-

-# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting

-# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that

-# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.

-

-XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file

-# that captures the structure of the code including all

-# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental

-# and incomplete at the moment.

-

-GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# configuration options related to the Perl module output

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will

-# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of

-# the code including all documentation. Note that this

-# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the

-# moment.

-

-GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO

-

-# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate

-# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able

-# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.

-

-PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO

-

-# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be

-# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.

-# This is useful

-# if you want to understand what is going on.

-# On the other hand, if this

-# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller

-# and Perl will parse it just the same.

-

-PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES

-

-# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file

-# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.

-# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same

-# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.

-

-PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration options related to the preprocessor

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include

-# files.

-

-ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES

-

-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro

-# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional

-# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled

-# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.

-

-MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES

-

-# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES

-# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the

-# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.

-

-EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES

-

-# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files

-# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.

-

-SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES

-

-# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by

-# the preprocessor.

-

-INCLUDE_PATH           =

-

-# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard

-# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the

-# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will

-# be used.

-

-INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =

-

-# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that

-# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of

-# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name

-# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are

-# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being

-# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator

-# instead of the = operator.

-

-PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \

-                         PROGMEM

-

-# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then

-# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.

-# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.

-# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.

-

-EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = 

-

-# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then

-# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone

-# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such

-# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse

-# the parser if not removed.

-

-SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration::additions related to external references

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.

-# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation

-# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without

-# this location is as follows:

-#

-# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...

-# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:

-#

-# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...

-# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or

-# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool

-# does not have to be run to correct the links.

-# Note that each tag file must have a unique name

-# (where the name does NOT include the path)

-# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen

-# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.

-

-TAGFILES               =

-

-# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create

-# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.

-

-GENERATE_TAGFILE       =

-

-# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed

-# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes

-# will be listed.

-

-ALLEXTERNALS           = NO

-

-# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed

-# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will

-# be listed.

-

-EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES

-

-# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script

-# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').

-

-PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl

-

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# Configuration options related to the dot tool

-#---------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base

-# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that

-# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a

-# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more

-# powerful graphs.

-

-CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO

-

-# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc

-# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see

-# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the

-# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where

-# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the

-# default search path.

-

-MSCGEN_PATH            =

-

-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide

-# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented

-# or is not a class.

-

-HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES

-

-# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is

-# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization

-# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section

-# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)

-

-HAVE_DOT               = NO

-

-# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output

-# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This

-# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need

-# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name

-# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,

-# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the

-# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory

-# containing the font.

-

-DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans

-

-# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.

-# The default size is 10pt.

-

-DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10

-

-# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the

-# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a

-# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot

-# can find it using this tag.

-

-DOT_FONTPATH           =

-

-# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and

-# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the

-# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.

-

-CLASS_GRAPH            = NO

-

-# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and

-# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and

-# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.

-

-COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO

-

-# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies

-

-GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO

-

-# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and

-# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling

-# Language.

-

-UML_LOOK               = NO

-

-# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the

-# relations between templates and their instances.

-

-TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT

-# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented

-# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with

-# other documented files.

-

-INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO

-

-# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and

-# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each

-# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or

-# indirectly include this file.

-

-INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO

-

-# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then

-# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function

-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase

-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs

-# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.

-

-CALL_GRAPH             = NO

-

-# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then

-# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function

-# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase

-# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller

-# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.

-

-CALLER_GRAPH           = NO

-

-# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen

-# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.

-

-GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO

-

-# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES

-# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories

-# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include

-# relations between the files in the directories.

-

-DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO

-

-# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images

-# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif

-# If left blank png will be used.

-

-DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png

-

-# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be

-# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.

-

-DOT_PATH               =

-

-# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that

-# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the

-# \dotfile command).

-

-DOTFILE_DIRS           =

-

-# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of

-# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph

-# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is

-# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the

-# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than

-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note

-# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.

-

-DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15

-

-# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the

-# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable

-# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes

-# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this

-# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large

-# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by

-# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.

-

-MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2

-

-# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent

-# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not

-# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,

-# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of

-# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).

-

-DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES

-

-# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output

-# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This

-# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)

-# support this, this feature is disabled by default.

-

-DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO

-

-# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and

-# arrows in the dot generated graphs.

-

-GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES

-

-# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will

-# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate

-# the various graphs.

-

-DOT_CLEANUP            = YES

+# Doxyfile 1.6.2
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+#       TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+#       TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Virtual Serial/Mass Storage Device Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Esperanto, Farsi, Finnish, French, German,
+# Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English
+# messages), Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian,
+# Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak,
+# Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Ukrainian, and Vietnamese.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it parses.
+# With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given extension.
+# Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it using this tag.
+# The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and language is one of
+# the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, C#, C, C++, D, PHP,
+# Objective-C, Python, Fortran, VHDL, C, C++. For instance to make doxygen treat
+# .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), and .f files as C (default is Fortran),
+# use: inc=Fortran f=C. Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will list include files with double quotes in the documentation
+# rather than with sharp brackets.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and destructors are listed first. If set to NO (the default) the constructors will appear in the respective orders defined by SORT_MEMBER_DOCS and SORT_BRIEF_DOCS. This tag will be ignored for brief docs if SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO and ignored for detailed docs if SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES       = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page.
+# This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = 
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output.
+# If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis.
+# Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match.
+# The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code.
+# Otherwise they will link to the documentation.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting
+# this to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS     = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME is set, it specifies the name of a custom filter to add.
+# For more information please see
+# http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILT_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the custom filter to add.For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#custom-filters">Qt Help Project / Custom Filters</a>.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this project's
+# filter section matches.
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes">Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes</a>.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+#  will be generated, which together with the HTML files, form an Eclipse help
+#  plugin. To install this plugin and make it available under the help contents
+# menu in Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML
+# files needs to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of
+# the directory within the plugins directory should be the same as
+# the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have
+# this name.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (i.e. any modern browser).
+# Windows users are probably better off using the HTML help feature.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# By enabling USE_INLINE_TREES, doxygen will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list.
+
+USE_INLINE_TREES       = NO
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript
+# and DHTML and should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) there is already a search function so this one should
+# typically be disabled. For large projects the javascript based search engine
+# can be slow, then enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be implemented using a PHP enabled web server instead of at the web client using Javascript. Doxygen will generate the search PHP script and index
+# file to put on the web server. The advantage of the server based approach is that it scales better to large projects and allows full text search. The disadvances is that it is more difficult to setup
+# and does not have live searching capabilities.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for
+# generating bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the
+# Makefile that is written to the output directory.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If LATEX_SOURCE_CODE is set to YES then doxygen will include source code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as SOURCE_BROWSER.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA             =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD                =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader.
+# This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on.
+# On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      = 
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+#
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf
index 505e4f07b..dc90ffae0 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/LUFA VirtualSerialMassStorage.inf
@@ -1,106 +1,106 @@
-;************************************************************

-; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File

-; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation

-

-

-[Version]

-Signature="$Windows NT$"

-Class=Ports

-ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}

-Provider=%MFGNAME%

-LayoutFile=layout.inf

-CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat

-DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0

-

-[Manufacturer]

-%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64

-

-[DestinationDirs]

-DefaultDestDir=12

-

-

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-[DriverInstall.nt]

-include=mdmcpq.inf

-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt

-AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg

-

-[DriverCopyFiles.nt]

-usbser.sys,,,0x20

-

-[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]

-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern

-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys

-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"

-

-[DriverInstall.nt.Services]

-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt

-

-[DriverService.nt]

-DisplayName=%SERVICE%

-ServiceType=1

-StartType=3

-ErrorControl=1

-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys

-

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-;  Vista-64bit Sections

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-[DriverInstall.NTamd64]

-include=mdmcpq.inf

-CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64

-AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg

-

-[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]

-%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20

-

-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]

-HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern

-HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys

-HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"

-

-[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]

-AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64

-

-[DriverService.NTamd64]

-DisplayName=%SERVICE%

-ServiceType=1

-StartType=3

-ErrorControl=1

-ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys

-

-

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side

-; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.

-; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.

-; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.

-; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-[SourceDisksFiles]

-[SourceDisksNames]

-[DeviceList]

-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00

-

-[DeviceList.NTamd64]

-%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00

-

-

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-;  String Definitions

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-;Modify these strings to customize your device

-;------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-[Strings]

-MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"

-DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"

-MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"

-INSTDISK="LUFA CDC/Mass Storage Driver Installer"

-DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"

+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+LayoutFile=layout.inf
+CatalogFile=%MFGFILENAME%.cat
+DriverVer=11/15/2007,5.1.2600.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTamd64
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Windows 2000/XP/Vista-32bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.nt]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.nt
+AddReg=DriverInstall.nt.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.nt]
+usbser.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.nt.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.nt
+
+[DriverService.nt]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vista-64bit Sections
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64]
+include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64
+AddReg=DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg
+
+[DriverCopyFiles.NTamd64]
+%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys,,,0x20
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.AddReg]
+HKR,,DevLoader,,*ntkern
+HKR,,NTMPDriver,,%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"MsPorts.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+[DriverInstall.NTamd64.Services]
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, DriverService.NTamd64
+
+[DriverService.NTamd64]
+DisplayName=%SERVICE%
+ServiceType=1
+StartType=3
+ErrorControl=1
+ServiceBinary=%12%\%DRIVERFILENAME%.sys
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+[SourceDisksNames]
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2068&MI_00
+
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGFILENAME="CDC_vista"
+DRIVERFILENAME ="usbser"
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+INSTDISK="LUFA CDC/Mass Storage Driver Installer"
+DESCRIPTION="Communications Port"
 SERVICE="USB RS-232 Emulation Driver"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
index 64573520a..f962729dc 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -1,534 +1,534 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of

- *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored

- *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such

- *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.

- */

-

-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C

-#include "DataflashManager.h"

-

-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from

- *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes

- *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state

- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence

- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write

- */

-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)

-{

-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);

-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;

-

-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */

-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)

-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-#endif

-

-	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);

-

-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */

-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())

-	  return;

-

-	while (TotalBlocks)

-	{

-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;

-

-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */

-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))

-		{

-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */

-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-			{

-				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */

-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())

-				  return;

-			}

-

-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */

-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))

-			{

-				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */

-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);

-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-

-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */

-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;

-				CurrDFPage++;

-

-				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */

-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))

-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);

-

-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */

-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)

-				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */

-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))

-				{

-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */

-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);

-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-				}

-#endif

-

-				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */

-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);

-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);

-			}

-

-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());

-

-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */

-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;

-

-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */

-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;

-

-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */

-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */

-		TotalBlocks--;

-	}

-

-	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */

-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);

-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-

-	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-

-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-}

-

-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into

- *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash

- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state

- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence

- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read

- */

-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)

-{

-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);

-

-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */

-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-

-	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */

-	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())

-	  return;

-

-	while (TotalBlocks)

-	{

-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;

-

-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */

-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))

-		{

-			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */

-			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-			{

-				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */

-				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())

-				  return;

-			}

-

-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */

-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))

-			{

-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */

-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;

-				CurrDFPage++;

-

-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */

-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);

-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-			}

-

-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());

-

-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */

-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;

-

-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */

-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;

-

-			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */

-			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)

-			  return;

-		}

-

-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */

-		TotalBlocks--;

-	}

-

-	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))

-	  Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-}

-

-/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from

- *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the

- *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the

- *  Dataflash.

- *

- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence

- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write

- *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer

- */

-void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,

-                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr)

-{

-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);

-	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;

-

-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */

-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)

-	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-#endif

-

-	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);

-

-	while (TotalBlocks)

-	{

-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;

-

-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */

-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))

-		{

-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */

-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))

-			{

-				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */

-				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);

-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-

-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */

-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;

-				CurrDFPage++;

-

-				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */

-				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))

-				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);

-

-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */

-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)

-				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */

-				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))

-				{

-					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */

-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);

-					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-				}

-#endif

-

-				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */

-				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);

-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);

-			}

-

-			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */

-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)

-			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));

-

-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */

-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;

-

-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */

-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;

-		}

-

-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */

-		TotalBlocks--;

-	}

-

-	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */

-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);

-	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();

-

-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-}

-

-/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into

- *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash

- *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read

- *  the files stored on the Dataflash.

- *

- *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence

- *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read

- *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer

- */

-void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,

-                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)

-{

-	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);

-	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);

-

-	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */

-	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);

-	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-

-	while (TotalBlocks)

-	{

-		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;

-

-		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */

-		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))

-		{

-			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */

-			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))

-			{

-				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */

-				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;

-				CurrDFPage++;

-

-				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */

-				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);

-

-				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */

-				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);

-				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);

-			}

-

-			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */

-			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)

-			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();

-

-			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */

-			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;

-

-			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */

-			BytesInBlockDiv16++;

-		}

-

-		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */

-		TotalBlocks--;

-	}

-

-	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-}

-

-/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */

-void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)

-{

-	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */

-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-

-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */

-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)

-	{

-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-

-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);

-	}

-

-	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */

-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)

-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);

-

-	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */

-	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)

-	{

-		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();

-

-		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);

-		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);

-	}

-	#endif

-

-	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-}

-

-/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise

- */

-bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)

-{

-	uint8_t ReturnByte;

-

-	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */

-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);

-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */

-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)

-	  return false;

-

-	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)

-	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */

-	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);

-	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);

-	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();

-	Dataflash_DeselectChip();

-

-	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */

-	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)

-	  return false;

-	#endif

-

-	return true;

-}

-

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if all media chips are working, false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
index eac0653e0..0dc4d26be 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -1,85 +1,85 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_

-#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-

-		#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"

-		#include "Descriptors.h"

-

-		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>

-

-	/* Preprocessor Checks: */

-		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)

-			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.

-		#endif

-

-	/* Defines: */

-		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */

-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)

-

-		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying

-		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.

-		 */

-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512

-

-		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not

-		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.

-		 */

-		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);

-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);

-		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,

-		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,

-		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,

-		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);

-		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);

-		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);

-

-#endif

-

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
index d7842c5f8..66b58a124 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -1,347 +1,347 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage

- *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,

- *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.

- */

-

-#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C

-#include "SCSI.h"

-

-/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's

- *  features and capabilities.

- */

-static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =

-	{

-		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,

-		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,

-

-		.Removable           = true,

-

-		.Version             = 0,

-

-		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,

-		.NormACA             = false,

-		.TrmTsk              = false,

-		.AERC                = false,

-

-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,

-

-		.SoftReset           = false,

-		.CmdQue              = false,

-		.Linked              = false,

-		.Sync                = false,

-		.WideBus16Bit        = false,

-		.WideBus32Bit        = false,

-		.RelAddr             = false,

-

-		.VendorID            = "LUFA",

-		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",

-		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},

-	};

-

-/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE

- *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.

- */

-static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =

-	{

-		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,

-		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,

-	};

-

-

-/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches

- *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns

- *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise

- */

-bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	bool CommandSuccess = false;

-

-	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */

-	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])

-	{

-		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:

-			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);

-			break;

-		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:

-		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:

-		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:

-			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */

-			CommandSuccess = true;

-			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;

-			break;

-		default:

-			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */

-			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,

-		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,

-		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-			break;

-	}

-

-	/* Check if command was successfully processed */

-	if (CommandSuccess)

-	{

-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,

-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,

-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-

-		return true;

-	}

-

-	return false;

-}

-

-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features

- *  and capabilities to the host.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.

- */

-static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);

-	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));

-

-	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */

-	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||

-	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])

-	{

-		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */

-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,

-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,

-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-

-		return false;

-	}

-

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);

-

-	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */

-	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);

-

-	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,

- *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.

- */

-static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];

-	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));

-

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);

-	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity

- *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.

- */

-static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);

-	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;

-

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);

-	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the

- *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is

- *  supported.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.

- */

-static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */

-	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))

-	{

-		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */

-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,

-		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,

-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-

-		return false;

-	}

-

-	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */

-	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))

-	{

-		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */

-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,

-		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,

-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-

-		return false;

-	}

-

-	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address

- *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual

- *  reading and writing of the data.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.

- */

-static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-                                      const bool IsDataRead)

-{

-	uint32_t BlockAddress;

-	uint16_t TotalBlocks;

-

-	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */

-	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)

-	{

-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */

-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,

-		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,

-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-

-		return false;		

-	}

-

-	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */

-	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);

-

-	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */

-	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);

-

-	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */

-	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)

-	{

-		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */

-		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,

-		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,

-		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);

-

-		return false;

-	}

-

-	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)

-	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */

-	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);

-	#endif

-	

-	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */

-	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)

-	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);

-	else

-	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);

-

-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);

-

-	return true;

-}

-

-/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about

- *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.

- */

-static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */

-	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);

-	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);

-	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);

-	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);

-	Endpoint_ClearIN();

-

-	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */

-	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;

-

-	return true;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;		
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	#if (TOTAL_LUNS > 1)
+	/* Adjust the given block address to the real media address based on the selected LUN */
+	BlockAddress += ((uint32_t)MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.LUN * LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS);
+	#endif
+	
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if the command completed successfully, false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
index 96c8d6a35..85f77c424 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -1,88 +1,88 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for SCSI.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _SCSI_H_

-#define _SCSI_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>

-

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-

-		#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"

-		#include "Descriptors.h"

-		#include "DataflashManager.h"

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This

-		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about

-		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.

-		 *

-		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to

-		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to

-		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to

-		 */

-		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \

-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \

-		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); }MACROE

-

-		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */

-		#define DATA_READ           true

-

-		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */

-		#define DATA_WRITE          false

-

-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */

-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00

-

-		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */

-		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);

-

-		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)

-			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);

-			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);

-			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);

-			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);

-			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,

-			                                      const bool IsDataRead);

-			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);

-		#endif

-

-#endif

-

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  MACROS{ SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                   SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); }MACROE
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c
index 810cfb8b8..975067fd4 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.c
@@ -1,213 +1,213 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialMassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of

- *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.

- */

-

-#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"

-

-/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is

- *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class

- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.

- */

-USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =

-	{

-		.Config =

-			{

-				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,

-

-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,

-				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,

-

-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,

-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,

-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,

-

-				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,

-				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,

-				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,

-			},

-	};

-	

-/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is

- *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class

- *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.

- */

-USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =

-	{

-		.Config =

-			{

-				.InterfaceNumber                = 2,

-

-				.DataINEndpointNumber           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,

-				.DataINEndpointSize             = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,

-				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,

-

-				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,

-				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,

-				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,

-

-				.TotalLUNs                      = TOTAL_LUNS,

-			},

-	};

-

-/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be

- *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs

- */

-static FILE USBSerialStream;

-

-

-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial

- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.

- */

-int main(void)

-{

-	SetupHardware();

-

-	/* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */

-	CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);

-

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

-	sei();

-

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		CheckJoystickMovement();

-

-		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */

-		CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);

-

-		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);

-		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);

-		USB_USBTask();

-	}

-}

-

-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */

-void SetupHardware(void)

-{

-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */

-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);

-	wdt_disable();

-

-	/* Disable clock division */

-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);

-

-	/* Hardware Initialization */

-	LEDs_Init();

-	Joystick_Init();

-	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);

-	Dataflash_Init();

-	USB_Init();

-

-	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */

-	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();

-}

-

-/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */

-void CheckJoystickMovement(void)

-{

-	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();

-	char*       ReportString  = NULL;

-	static bool ActionSent    = false;

-

-	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)

-	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";

-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)

-	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";

-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)

-	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";

-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)

-	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";

-	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)

-	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";

-	else

-	  ActionSent = false;

-

-	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))

-	{

-		ActionSent = true;

-

-		/* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */

-		fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);

-

-		/* Alternatively, without the stream: */

-		// CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString);

-	}

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)

-{

-	bool ConfigSuccess = true;

-

-	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);

-	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);

-

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)

-{

-	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);

-	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);

-}

-

-/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.

- *

- *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced

- */

-bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)

-{

-	bool CommandSuccess;

-

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);

-	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);

-

-	return CommandSuccess;

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the VirtualSerialMassStorage demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "VirtualSerialMassStorage.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = 0,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = CDC_TX_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = CDC_RX_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.NotificationEndpointNumber     = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM,
+				.NotificationEndpointSize       = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+				.NotificationEndpointDoubleBank = false,
+			},
+	};
+	
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber                = 2,
+
+				.DataINEndpointNumber           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPNUM,
+				.DataINEndpointSize             = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataINEndpointDoubleBank       = false,
+
+				.DataOUTEndpointNumber          = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPNUM,
+				.DataOUTEndpointSize            = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+				.DataOUTEndpointDoubleBank      = false,
+
+				.TotalLUNs                      = TOTAL_LUNS,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Create a regular character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		CheckJoystickMovement();
+
+		/* Must throw away unused bytes from the host, or it will lock up while waiting for the device */
+		CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	SPI_Init(SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2 | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | SPI_SCK_LEAD_FALLING | SPI_SAMPLE_TRAILING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Checks for changes in the position of the board joystick, sending strings to the host upon each change. */
+void CheckJoystickMovement(void)
+{
+	uint8_t     JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	char*       ReportString  = NULL;
+	static bool ActionSent    = false;
+
+	if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Up\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Down\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Left\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Right\r\n";
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS)
+	  ReportString = "Joystick Pressed\r\n";
+	else
+	  ActionSent = false;
+
+	if ((ReportString != NULL) && (ActionSent == false))
+	{
+		ActionSent = true;
+
+		/* Write the string to the virtual COM port via the created character stream */
+		fputs(ReportString, &USBSerialStream);
+
+		/* Alternatively, without the stream: */
+		// CDC_Device_SendString(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, ReportString);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h
index 6eaa19b79..7bb11d0c3 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.h
@@ -1,91 +1,91 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_

-#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <avr/io.h>

-		#include <avr/wdt.h>

-		#include <avr/power.h>

-		#include <avr/interrupt.h>

-		#include <string.h>

-

-		#include "Descriptors.h"

-

-		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"

-		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"

-		

-		#include <LUFA/Version.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-

-	/* Macros: */

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)

-

-		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */

-		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2

-

-		/** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */

-		#define TOTAL_LUNS                1

-

-		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */

-		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)

-		

-		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */

-		#define DISK_READ_ONLY            false

-

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		void SetupHardware(void);

-		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);

-

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);

-		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);

-

-#endif

-

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for VirtualSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+#define _VIRTUALSERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Total number of logical drives within the device - must be non-zero. */
+		#define TOTAL_LUNS                1
+
+		/** Blocks in each LUN, calculated from the total capacity divided by the total number of Logical Units in the device. */
+		#define LUN_MEDIA_BLOCKS         (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS / TOTAL_LUNS)
+		
+		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
+		#define DISK_READ_ONLY            false
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void CheckJoystickMovement(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt
index af13cdd27..ff1d3c26e 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/VirtualSerialMassStorage.txt
@@ -1,86 +1,86 @@
-/** \file

- *

- *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special

- *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.

- */

-

-/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mass Storage Demo

- *

- *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:

- *

- *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.

- *

- *  - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)

- *  - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)

- *  - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)

- *

- *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:

- *

- *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>

- *    <td>Device</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>

- *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n

- *        Mass Storage Device</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>

- *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n

- *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>

- *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n

- *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n

- *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n

- *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n

- *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>

- *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- *

- *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:

- *

- *  Combined Communications Device Class/Mass Storage demonstration application.

- *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined

- *  CDC and Mass Storage device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a flash

- *  drive. Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings, and data can be

- *  written to or read from the exposed flash drive interface in the same manner as

- *  other USB flash drives. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the

- *  host.

- *

- *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,

- *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo

- *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under

- *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,

- *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other

- *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt

- *  CDC-ACM drivers.

- *

- *  \section Sec_Options Project Options

- *

- *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.

- *

- *  <table>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>

- *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>

- *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>

- *   </tr>

- *   <tr>

- *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>

- *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>

- *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive -

- *        this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>

- *   </tr>

- *  </table>

- */

-

+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Communications Device Class (Virtual Serial Port) and Mass Storage Demo
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  - Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  - Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  - Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM) \n
+ *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
+ *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Combined Communications Device Class/Mass Storage demonstration application.
+ *  This gives a simple reference application for implementing a combined
+ *  CDC and Mass Storage device acting as a both a virtual serial port and a flash
+ *  drive. Joystick actions are transmitted to the host as strings, and data can be
+ *  written to or read from the exposed flash drive interface in the same manner as
+ *  other USB flash drives. The device does not respond to serial data sent from the
+ *  host.
+ *
+ *  After running this demo for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this demo
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Define Name:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Location:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>Description:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TOTAL_LUNS</td>
+ *    <td>MassStorage.h</td>
+ *    <td>Total number of Logical Units (drives) in the device. The total device capacity is shared equally between each drive -
+ *        this can be set to any positive non-zero amount.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile
index 21b1d7fa3..cfef5268f 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile
+++ b/Demos/Device/ClassDriver/VirtualSerialMassStorage/makefile
@@ -1,727 +1,727 @@
-# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-

-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.

-#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<

-#

-# Released to the Public Domain

-#

-# Additional material for this makefile was written by:

-# Peter Fleury

-# Tim Henigan

-# Colin O'Flynn

-# Reiner Patommel

-# Markus Pfaff

-# Sander Pool

-# Frederik Rouleau

-# Carlos Lamas

-# Dean Camera

-# Opendous Inc.

-# Denver Gingerich

-#

-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-# On command line:

-#

-# make all = Make software.

-#

-# make clean = Clean out built project files.

-#

-# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.

-#

-# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.

-#

-# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.

-#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!

-#

-# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must

-#            have dfu-programmer installed).

-#

-# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must

-#             have Atmel FLIP installed).

-#

-# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer

-#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).

-#

-# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP

-#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).

-#

-# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have

-#                DoxyGen installed)

-#

-# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,

-#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.

-#

-# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.

-#

-# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting

-#                   bug reports to the GCC project.

-#

-# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".

-#----------------------------------------------------------------------------

-

-

-# MCU name

-MCU = at90usb1287

-

-

-# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation).

-ARCH = AVR8

-

-

-# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring

-# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called

-# "Board" inside the application directory.

-BOARD = USBKEY

-

-

-# Processor frequency.

-#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the

-#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to

-#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done

-#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.

-#

-#     This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by

-#     F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value

-#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to

-#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate

-#     software delays.

-F_CPU = 8000000

-

-

-# Input clock frequency.

-#     This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the

-#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may

-#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the

-#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed

-#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'

-#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your

-#     source code.

-#

-#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the

-#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.

-F_USB = $(F_CPU)

-

-

-# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)

-FORMAT = ihex

-

-

-# Target file name (without extension).

-TARGET = VirtualSerialMassStorage

-

-

-# Object files directory

-#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make

-#     this an empty or blank macro!

-OBJDIR = .

-

-

-# Path to the LUFA library

-LUFA_PATH = ../../../..

-

-

-# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens

-LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY

-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8

-LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1

-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS

-LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"

-

-

-# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile

-include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile

-

-

-# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)

-SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \

-	  Descriptors.c                                               \

-	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \

-	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \

-	  $(LUFA_SRC_USB)                                             \

-	  $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)

-

-

-# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)

-CPPSRC =

-

-

-# List Assembler source files here.

-#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s

-#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler

-#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!

-#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,

-#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does

-#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.

-ASRC =

-

-

-# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].

-#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.

-#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)

-OPT = s

-

-

-# Debugging format.

-#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.

-#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.

-#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.

-DEBUG = dwarf-2

-

-

-# List any extra directories to look for include files here.

-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.

-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.

-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.

-EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/

-

-

-# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.

-#     c89   = "ANSI" C

-#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions

-#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)

-#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions

-CSTANDARD = -std=c99

-

-

-# Place -D or -U options here for C sources

-CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL

-CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL

-CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)

-CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)

-

-

-# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources

-ADEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)

-ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL

-ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)

-ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)

-

-# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources

-CPPDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL

-CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL

-CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)

-CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)

-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS

-#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS

-

-

-

-#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------

-#  -g*:          generate debugging information

-#  -O*:          optimization level

-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation

-#  -Wall...:     warning level

-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.

-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing

-CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)

-CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)

-CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)

-CFLAGS += -funsigned-char

-CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields

-CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections

-CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions

-CFLAGS += -fpack-struct

-CFLAGS += -fshort-enums

-CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing

-CFLAGS += -Wall

-CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes

-#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls

-#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time

-#CFLAGS += -Wundef

-#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code

-#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare

-CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))

-CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)

-

-

-#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------

-#  -g*:          generate debugging information

-#  -O*:          optimization level

-#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation

-#  -Wall...:     warning level

-#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.

-#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing

-CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)

-CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)

-CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)

-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char

-CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields

-CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct

-CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums

-CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions

-CPPFLAGS += -Wall

-CPPFLAGS += -Wundef

-#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls

-#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time

-#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes

-#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code

-#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare

-CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))

-#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)

-

-

-#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------

-#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.

-#  -adhlns:   create listing

-#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that

-#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames

-#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source

-#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]

-#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex

-#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.

-ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100

-

-

-#---------------- Library Options ----------------

-# Minimalistic printf version

-PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min

-

-# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)

-PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt

-

-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.

-PRINTF_LIB =

-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)

-#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)

-

-

-# Minimalistic scanf version

-SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min

-

-# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)

-SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt

-

-# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.

-SCANF_LIB =

-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)

-#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)

-

-

-MATH_LIB = -lm

-

-

-# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.

-#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.

-#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.

-#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.

-EXTRALIBDIRS =

-

-

-

-#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------

-

-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),

-# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).

-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff

-

-# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),

-# only used for heap (malloc()).

-#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff

-

-EXTMEMOPTS =

-

-

-

-#---------------- Linker Options ----------------

-#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.

-#    -Map:      create map file

-#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file

-LDFLAGS  = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref

-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax

-LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections

-LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)

-LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))

-LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)

-#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x

-

-

-

-#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------

-

-# Programming hardware

-# Type: avrdude -c ?

-# to get a full listing.

-#

-AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII

-

-# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.

-AVRDUDE_PORT = usb

-

-AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex

-#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep

-

-

-# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.

-# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,

-# see avrdude manual.

-#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y

-

-# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be

-# performed after programming the device.

-#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V

-

-# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug

-# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>

-# to submit bug reports.

-#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v

-

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)

-AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)

-

-

-

-#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------

-

-# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.

-DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)

-

-# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.

-# DEBUG_UI = gdb

-DEBUG_UI = insight

-

-# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.

-DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice

-#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr

-

-# GDB Init Filename.

-GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit

-

-# When using avarice settings for the JTAG

-JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1

-

-# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.

-DEBUG_PORT = 4242

-

-# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally

-#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when

-#     avarice is running on a different computer.

-DEBUG_HOST = localhost

-

-

-

-#============================================================================

-

-

-# Define programs and commands.

-SHELL = sh

-CC = avr-gcc

-OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy

-OBJDUMP = avr-objdump

-SIZE = avr-size

-AR = avr-ar rcs

-NM = avr-nm

-AVRDUDE = avrdude

-REMOVE = rm -f

-REMOVEDIR = rm -rf

-COPY = cp

-WINSHELL = cmd

-

-

-# Define Messages

-# English

-MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none

-MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------

-MSG_END = --------  end  --------

-MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:

-MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:

-MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:

-MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:

-MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:

-MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:

-MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:

-MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:

-MSG_LINKING = Linking:

-MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:

-MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:

-MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:

-MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:

-MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:

-

-

-

-

-# Define all object files.

-OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)

-

-# Define all listing files.

-LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-

-

-# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.

-GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d

-

-

-# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.

-# Add target processor to flags.

-ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)

-ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)

-ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)

-

-

-

-

-

-# Default target.

-all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end

-

-# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.

-build: elf hex eep lss sym

-#build: lib

-

-

-elf: $(TARGET).elf

-hex: $(TARGET).hex

-eep: $(TARGET).eep

-lss: $(TARGET).lss

-sym: $(TARGET).sym

-LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a

-lib: $(LIBNAME)

-

-

-

-# Eye candy.

-# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on

-# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.

-begin:

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)

-

-end:

-	@echo $(MSG_END)

-	@echo

-

-

-# Display size of file.

-HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex

-ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf

-MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )

-FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )

-

-

-sizebefore:

-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \

-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi

-

-sizeafter:

-	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \

-	2>/dev/null; echo; fi

-

-

-

-# Display compiler version information.

-gccversion :

-	@$(CC) --version

-

-

-# Program the device.

-program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)

-

-flip: $(TARGET).hex

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0

-

-dfu: $(TARGET).hex

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset

-

-flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program

-	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex

-

-dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep

-	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset

-

-

-# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:

-#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set

-#     a breakpoint at main().

-gdb-config:

-	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)

-	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-endif

-	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)

-

-debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf

-ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)

-	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \

-	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause

-

-else

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \

-	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)

-endif

-	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)

-

-

-

-

-# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.

-COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000

-COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000

-

-

-

-coff: $(TARGET).elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof

-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof

-

-

-extcoff: $(TARGET).elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof

-	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof

-

-

-

-# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.

-%.hex: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@

-	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@

-

-%.eep: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@

-	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \

-	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0

-

-# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.

-%.lss: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@

-	$(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@

-

-# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.

-%.sym: %.elf

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@

-	$(NM) -n $< > $@

-

-

-

-# Create library from object files.

-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a

-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)

-%.a: $(OBJ)

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@

-	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)

-

-

-# Link: create ELF output file from object files.

-.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf

-.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)

-%.elf: $(OBJ)

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@

-	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)

-

-

-# Compile: create object files from C source files.

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<

-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<

-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.

-%.s : %.c

-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.

-%.s : %.cpp

-	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.

-$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<

-	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.

-%.i : %.c

-	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@

-

-

-# Target: clean project.

-clean: begin clean_list end

-

-clean_list :

-	@echo

-	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym

-	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)

-	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)

-	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep

-

-doxygen:

-	@echo Generating Project Documentation...

-	@doxygen Doxygen.conf

-	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.

-

-clean_doxygen:

-	rm -rf Documentation

-

-checksource:

-	@for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \

-		if [ -f $$f ]; then \

-			echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \

-		else \

-			echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \

-		fi; done 

-

-

-# Create object files directory

-$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)

-

-

-# Include the dependency files.

--include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)

-

-

-# Listing of phony targets.

-.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \

-build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean          \

-clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee      \

-debug gdb-config checksource

+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, Jörg Wunsch, et al.
+#  >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+#                Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+#            have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+#             have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+#               (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+#                (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+#                DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+#              with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+#                   bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target architecture (see library "Board Types" documentation).
+ARCH = AVR8
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, NONE for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+#     processor frequency in Hz. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+#     calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+#     automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+#
+#     This will be an integer division of F_USB below, as it is sourced by
+#     F_USB after it has run through any CPU prescalers. Note that this value
+#     does not *change* the processor frequency - it should merely be updated to
+#     reflect the processor speed set externally so that the code can use accurate
+#     software delays.
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+#     This will define a symbol, F_USB, in all source code files equal to the
+#     input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed) in Hz. This value may
+#     differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+#     raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+#     clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+#     at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+#     source code.
+#
+#     If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+#     CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_USB = $(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = VirtualSerialMassStorage
+
+
+# Object files directory
+#     To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+#     this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# LUFA library compile-time options and predefined tokens
+LUFA_OPTS  = -D USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE=8
+LUFA_OPTS += -D FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS=1
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+LUFA_OPTS += -D USE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Create the LUFA source path variables by including the LUFA root makefile
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/makefile
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c                                                 \
+	  Descriptors.c                                               \
+	  Lib/DataflashManager.c                                      \
+	  Lib/SCSI.c                                                  \
+	  $(LUFA_SRC_USB)                                             \
+	  $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+#     Make them always end in a capital .S.  Files ending in a lowercase .s
+#     will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+#     output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+#     Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+#     it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+#     care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+#     0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+#     (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+#     Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+#     AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+#     AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+#     c89   = "ANSI" C
+#     gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+#     c99   = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+#     gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=c99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+CDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
+CDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD) -DARCH=ARCH_$(ARCH)
+CDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+ADEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
+ADEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+ADEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS  = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+CPPDEFS += -DF_USB=$(F_USB)UL
+CPPDEFS += -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CPPDEFS += $(LUFA_OPTS)
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fno-inline-small-functions
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -fno-strict-aliasing
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+#  -g*:          generate debugging information
+#  -O*:          optimization level
+#  -f...:        tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+#  -Wall...:     warning level
+#  -Wa,...:      tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#    -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CPPFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+#  -Wa,...:   tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+#  -adhlns:   create listing
+#  -gstabs:   have the assembler create line number information; note that
+#             for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+#             and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+#             files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+#  -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+#       dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+#     Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+#     Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+#     For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+#  -Wl,...:     tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+#    -Map:      create map file
+#    --cref:    add cross reference to  map file
+LDFLAGS  = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level.  Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+#     just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+#     avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = --------  end  --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+	@echo $(MSG_END)
+	@echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+
+sizebefore:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+	@if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+	2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+	@$(CC) --version
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash $(TARGET).hex
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	$(COPY) $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+	batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) eeprom-flash $(TARGET).eep
+	dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+#     define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+#     a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+	@$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+	@echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+	@echo load  >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+	@echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+	@echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+	$(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+	$(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+	@$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+	$(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom -R .fuse -R .lock $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+	-$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+	--change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+	$(OBJDUMP) -h -S -z $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+	$(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+	$(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+	$(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+	$(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+	$(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+	$(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list end
+
+clean_list :
+	@echo
+	@echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+	$(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+	$(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+	$(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+doxygen:
+	@echo Generating Project Documentation...
+	@doxygen Doxygen.conf
+	@echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+	rm -rf Documentation
+
+checksource:
+	@for f in $(SRC) $(CPPSRC) $(ASRC); do \
+		if [ -f $$f ]; then \
+			echo "Found Source File: $$f" ; \
+		else \
+			echo "Source File Not Found: $$f" ; \
+		fi; done 
+
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff doxygen clean          \
+clean_list clean_doxygen program dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee      \
+debug gdb-config checksource
diff --git a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c
index 08c50c736..039736a28 100644
--- a/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c
+++ b/Demos/Device/Incomplete/TestAndMeasurement/TestAndMeasurement.c
@@ -1,441 +1,441 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-              

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-#include "TestAndMeasurement.h"

-

-/** Contains the (usually static) capabilities of the TMC device. This table is requested by the

- *  host upon enumeration to give it information on what features of the Test and Measurement USB

- *  Class the device supports.

- */

-TMC_Capabilities_t Capabilities =

-	{

-		.Status     = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS,

-		.TMCVersion = VERSION_BCD(1.00),

-		

-		.Interface  =

-			{

-				.ListenOnly             = false,

-				.TalkOnly               = false,

-				.PulseIndicateSupported = false,

-			},

-

-		.Device     =

-			{

-				.SupportsAbortINOnMatch = false,

-			},

-	};

-

-/** Current TMC control request that is being processed */

-static uint8_t RequestInProgress = 0;

-

-/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk IN data */

-static bool IsTMCBulkINReset = false;

-

-/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk OUT data */

-static bool IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;

-

-/** Last used tag value for data transfers */

-static uint8_t CurrentTransferTag = 0;

-

-/** Length of last data transfer, for reporting to the host in case an in-progress transfer is aborted */

-static uint32_t LastTransferLength = 0;

-

-/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial

- *  setup of all components and the main program loop.

- */

-int main(void)

-{

-	SetupHardware();

-

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

-	sei();

-	

-	for (;;)

-	{

-		TMC_Task();

-		USB_USBTask();

-	}

-}

-

-/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */

-void SetupHardware(void)

-{

-	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */

-	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);

-	wdt_disable();

-

-	/* Disable clock division */

-	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);

-	

-	/* Hardware Initialization */

-	LEDs_Init();

-	USB_Init();

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and

- *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.

- */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via

- *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.

- */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)

-{

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration

- *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.

- */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)

-{

-	bool ConfigSuccess = true;

-

-	/* Setup TMC In, Out and Notification Endpoints */

-	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN,

-	                                            TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);

-	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM,  EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN,

-	                                            TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);

-	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT,

-	                                            TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);

-

-	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */

-	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);

-}

-

-/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to

- *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing

- *  internally.

- */

-void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)

-{

-	uint8_t TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS;

-

-	/* Process TMC specific control requests */

-	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)

-	{

-		case Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))

-			{

-				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */

-				if (RequestInProgress != 0)

-				{

-					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;

-				}

-				else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)

-				{

-					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data OUT requests should be aborted */

-					IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;

-					

-					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */

-					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut;

-				}

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				

-				/* Write the request response byte */

-				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-			

-			break;

-		case Req_CheckAbortBulkOutStatus:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))

-			{

-				/* Check that an ABORT BULK OUT transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */

-				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut)

-				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;				

-				else if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)

-				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;

-				else

-				  RequestInProgress = 0;	

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-								

-				/* Write the request response bytes */

-				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);

-				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);

-				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();				

-			}

-			

-			break;

-		case Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))

-			{

-				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */

-				if (RequestInProgress != 0)

-				{

-					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;				

-				}

-				else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)

-				{

-					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN requests should be aborted */

-					IsTMCBulkINReset = true;

-					

-					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */

-					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn;

-				}

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				

-				/* Write the request response bytes */

-				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(CurrentTransferTag);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-			

-			break;

-		case Req_CheckAbortBulkInStatus:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))

-			{

-				/* Check that an ABORT BULK IN transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */

-				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn)

-				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;

-				else if (IsTMCBulkINReset)

-				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;

-				else

-				  RequestInProgress = 0;

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-								

-				/* Write the request response bytes */

-				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);

-				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);

-				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-			

-			break;

-		case Req_InitiateClear:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress */

-				if (RequestInProgress != 0)

-				{

-					Endpoint_Write_8(TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS);				

-				}

-				else

-				{

-					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN and OUT requests should be aborted */

-					IsTMCBulkINReset  = true;

-					IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;

-					

-					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */

-					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateClear;

-				}

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-				

-				/* Write the request response byte */

-				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();

-			}

-			

-			break;

-		case Req_CheckClearStatus:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				/* Check that a CLEAR transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */

-				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateClear)

-				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;				

-				else if (IsTMCBulkINReset || IsTMCBulkOUTReset)

-				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;

-				else

-				  RequestInProgress = 0;

-

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-

-				/* Write the request response bytes */

-				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);

-				Endpoint_Write_8(0);

-				

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();				

-			}

-			

-			break;

-		case Req_GetCapabilities:

-			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))

-			{

-				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();

-					

-				/* Write the device capabilities to the control endpoint */

-				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&Capabilities, sizeof(TMC_Capabilities_t));				

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-			}

-			

-			break;

-	}

-}

-

-/** Function to manage TMC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */

-void TMC_Task(void)

-{

-	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */

-	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)

-	  return;

-	

-	TMC_MessageHeader_t MessageHeader;

-	uint16_t            BytesTransferred;

-	

-	/* Try to read in a TMC message from the interface, process if one is available */

-	if (ReadTMCHeader(&MessageHeader))

-	{

-		/* Indicate busy */

-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);

-		

-		switch (MessageHeader.MessageID)

-		{

-			case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_OUT:

-				BytesTransferred = 0;

-				while (Endpoint_Discard_Stream(MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) ==

-				       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-				{

-					if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)

-					  break;

-				}

-				LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred;

-				

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-				break;

-			case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_IN:

-				Endpoint_ClearOUT();

-				

-				char MessageData[] = "TMC Class Test";

-

-				MessageHeader.TransferSize = strlen(MessageData);

-				MessageHeader.MessageIDSpecific.DeviceOUT.LastMessageTransaction = true;

-				WriteTMCHeader(&MessageHeader);

-

-				BytesTransferred = 0;

-				while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageData, MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) ==

-				       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-				{

-					if (IsTMCBulkINReset)

-					  break;

-				}

-				LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred;

-

-				Endpoint_ClearIN();

-				break;

-			default:

-				Endpoint_StallTransaction();

-				break;

-		}

-

-		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);

-	}

-	

-	/* All pending data has been processed - reset the data abort flags */

-	IsTMCBulkINReset  = false;

-	IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;

-}

-

-/** Attempts to read in the TMC message header from the TMC interface.

- *

- *  \param[out] MessageHeader  Pointer to a location where the read header (if any) should be stored

- *

- *  \return Boolean true if a header was read, false otherwise

- */

-bool ReadTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)

-{

-	uint16_t BytesTransferred;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM);

-	

-	/* Abort if no command has been sent from the host */

-	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))

-	  return false;

-	

-	/* Read in the header of the command from the host */

-	BytesTransferred = 0;

-	while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==

-	       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-	{

-		if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)

-		  break;

-	}

-

-	/* Store the new command tag value for later use */

-	CurrentTransferTag = MessageHeader->Tag;

-	

-	/* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */

-	return (!(IsTMCBulkOUTReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));

-}

-

-bool WriteTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)

-{

-	uint16_t BytesTransferred;

-	uint8_t  ErrorCode;

-

-	/* Set the message tag of the command header */

-	MessageHeader->Tag        =  CurrentTransferTag;

-	MessageHeader->InverseTag = ~CurrentTransferTag;

-

-	/* Select the Data In endpoint */

-	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM);

-

-	/* Send the command header to the host */

-	BytesTransferred = 0;

-	while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==

-	       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)

-	{

-		if (IsTMCBulkINReset)

-		  break;

-	}

-

-	/* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */

-	return (!(IsTMCBulkINReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+              
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this 
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in 
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting 
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in 
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the 
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "TestAndMeasurement.h"
+
+/** Contains the (usually static) capabilities of the TMC device. This table is requested by the
+ *  host upon enumeration to give it information on what features of the Test and Measurement USB
+ *  Class the device supports.
+ */
+TMC_Capabilities_t Capabilities =
+	{
+		.Status     = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS,
+		.TMCVersion = VERSION_BCD(1.00),
+		
+		.Interface  =
+			{
+				.ListenOnly             = false,
+				.TalkOnly               = false,
+				.PulseIndicateSupported = false,
+			},
+
+		.Device     =
+			{
+				.SupportsAbortINOnMatch = false,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Current TMC control request that is being processed */
+static uint8_t RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk IN data */
+static bool IsTMCBulkINReset = false;
+
+/** Stream callback abort flag for bulk OUT data */
+static bool IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;
+
+/** Last used tag value for data transfers */
+static uint8_t CurrentTransferTag = 0;
+
+/** Length of last data transfer, for reporting to the host in case an in-progress transfer is aborted */
+static uint32_t LastTransferLength = 0;
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	sei();
+	
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		TMC_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+	
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Connect event. This indicates that the device is enumerating via the status LEDs and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_Disconnect event. This indicates that the device is no longer connected to a host via
+ *  the status LEDs and stops the USB management and CDC management tasks.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ConfigurationChanged event. This is fired when the host set the current configuration
+ *  of the USB device after enumeration - the device endpoints are configured and the CDC management task started.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup TMC In, Out and Notification Endpoints */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_NOTIFICATION_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN,
+	                                            TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM,  EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_IN,
+	                                            TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM, EP_TYPE_BULK, ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT,
+	                                            TMC_IO_EPSIZE, ENDPOINT_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	uint8_t TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SUCCESS;
+
+	/* Process TMC specific control requests */
+	switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */
+				if (RequestInProgress != 0)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data OUT requests should be aborted */
+					IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;
+					
+					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
+					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the request response byte */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case Req_CheckAbortBulkOutStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that an ABORT BULK OUT transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
+				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkOut)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;				
+				else if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
+				else
+				  RequestInProgress = 0;	
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+								
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
+				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();				
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress and the data transfer tag is valid */
+				if (RequestInProgress != 0)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS;				
+				}
+				else if (USB_ControlRequest.wValue != CurrentTransferTag)
+				{
+					TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_TRANSFER_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN requests should be aborted */
+					IsTMCBulkINReset = true;
+					
+					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
+					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(CurrentTransferTag);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case Req_CheckAbortBulkInStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_ENDPOINT))
+			{
+				/* Check that an ABORT BULK IN transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
+				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateAbortBulkIn)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;
+				else if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
+				else
+				  RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+								
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_16_LE(0);
+				Endpoint_Write_32_LE(LastTransferLength);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case Req_InitiateClear:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Check that no split transaction is already in progress */
+				if (RequestInProgress != 0)
+				{
+					Endpoint_Write_8(TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_IN_PROGRESS);				
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Indicate that all in-progress/pending data IN and OUT requests should be aborted */
+					IsTMCBulkINReset  = true;
+					IsTMCBulkOUTReset = true;
+					
+					/* Save the split request for later checking when a new request is received */
+					RequestInProgress = Req_InitiateClear;
+				}
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+				
+				/* Write the request response byte */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case Req_CheckClearStatus:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				/* Check that a CLEAR transaction has been requested and that the request has completed */
+				if (RequestInProgress != Req_InitiateClear)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_SPLIT_NOT_IN_PROGRESS;				
+				else if (IsTMCBulkINReset || IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+				  TMCRequestStatus = TMC_STATUS_PENDING;
+				else
+				  RequestInProgress = 0;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				/* Write the request response bytes */
+				Endpoint_Write_8(TMCRequestStatus);
+				Endpoint_Write_8(0);
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				Endpoint_ClearStatusStage();				
+			}
+			
+			break;
+		case Req_GetCapabilities:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+					
+				/* Write the device capabilities to the control endpoint */
+				Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(&Capabilities, sizeof(TMC_Capabilities_t));				
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+			
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to manage TMC data transmission and reception to and from the host. */
+void TMC_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+	
+	TMC_MessageHeader_t MessageHeader;
+	uint16_t            BytesTransferred;
+	
+	/* Try to read in a TMC message from the interface, process if one is available */
+	if (ReadTMCHeader(&MessageHeader))
+	{
+		/* Indicate busy */
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+		
+		switch (MessageHeader.MessageID)
+		{
+			case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_OUT:
+				BytesTransferred = 0;
+				while (Endpoint_Discard_Stream(MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) ==
+				       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+				{
+					if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+					  break;
+				}
+				LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred;
+				
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				break;
+			case TMC_MESSAGEID_DEV_DEP_MSG_IN:
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+				
+				char MessageData[] = "TMC Class Test";
+
+				MessageHeader.TransferSize = strlen(MessageData);
+				MessageHeader.MessageIDSpecific.DeviceOUT.LastMessageTransaction = true;
+				WriteTMCHeader(&MessageHeader);
+
+				BytesTransferred = 0;
+				while (Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageData, MessageHeader.TransferSize, &BytesTransferred) ==
+				       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+				{
+					if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
+					  break;
+				}
+				LastTransferLength = BytesTransferred;
+
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+				break;
+			default:
+				Endpoint_StallTransaction();
+				break;
+		}
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+	
+	/* All pending data has been processed - reset the data abort flags */
+	IsTMCBulkINReset  = false;
+	IsTMCBulkOUTReset = false;
+}
+
+/** Attempts to read in the TMC message header from the TMC interface.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] MessageHeader  Pointer to a location where the read header (if any) should be stored
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean true if a header was read, false otherwise
+ */
+bool ReadTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Select the Data Out endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_OUT_EPNUM);
+	
+	/* Abort if no command has been sent from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()))
+	  return false;
+	
+	/* Read in the header of the command from the host */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==
+	       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (IsTMCBulkOUTReset)
+		  break;
+	}
+
+	/* Store the new command tag value for later use */
+	CurrentTransferTag = MessageHeader->Tag;
+	
+	/* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */
+	return (!(IsTMCBulkOUTReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));
+}
+
+bool WriteTMCHeader(TMC_MessageHeader_t* const MessageHeader)
+{
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred;
+	uint8_t  ErrorCode;
+
+	/* Set the message tag of the command header */
+	MessageHeader->Tag        =  CurrentTransferTag;
+	MessageHeader->InverseTag = ~CurrentTransferTag;
+
+	/* Select the Data In endpoint */
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(TMC_IN_EPNUM);
+
+	/* Send the command header to the host */
+	BytesTransferred = 0;
+	while ((ErrorCode = Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(MessageHeader, sizeof(TMC_MessageHeader_t), &BytesTransferred)) ==
+	       ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_IncompleteTransfer)
+	{
+		if (IsTMCBulkINReset)
+		  break;
+	}
+
+	/* Indicate if the command has been aborted or not */
+	return (!(IsTMCBulkINReset) && (ErrorCode == ENDPOINT_RWSTREAM_NoError));
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c
index cd26538eb..3a1b604ff 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.c
@@ -1,83 +1,83 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Android Accessory Mode utility functions, for the configuration of an attached

- *  Android device into Android Accessory Mode ready for general communication.

- */

- 

-#include "AndroidAccessoryCommands.h" 

-

-uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),

-		.bRequest      = ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = 0,

-		.wLength       = sizeof(uint16_t),

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol);

-}

-

-uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,

-                           char* String)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),

-		.bRequest      = ANDROID_Req_SendString,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = StringIndex,

-		.wLength       = (strlen(String) + 1),

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(String);

-}

-

-uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void)

-{

-	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)

-	{

-		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),

-		.bRequest      = ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode,

-		.wValue        = 0,

-		.wIndex        = 0,

-		.wLength       = 0,

-	};

-

-	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);

-	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);	

-}

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Android Accessory Mode utility functions, for the configuration of an attached
+ *  Android device into Android Accessory Mode ready for general communication.
+ */
+ 
+#include "AndroidAccessoryCommands.h" 
+
+uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = sizeof(uint16_t),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(Protocol);
+}
+
+uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,
+                           char* String)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = ANDROID_Req_SendString,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = StringIndex,
+		.wLength       = (strlen(String) + 1),
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(String);
+}
+
+uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void)
+{
+	USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+	{
+		.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_VENDOR | REQREC_DEVICE),
+		.bRequest      = ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode,
+		.wValue        = 0,
+		.wIndex        = 0,
+		.wLength       = 0,
+	};
+
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+	return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);	
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h
index d5f6fa842..68fbb47b1 100644
--- a/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h
+++ b/Demos/Host/Incomplete/AndroidAccessoryHost/Lib/AndroidAccessoryCommands.h
@@ -1,74 +1,74 @@
-/*

-             LUFA Library

-     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.

-

-  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com

-           www.lufa-lib.org

-*/

-

-/*

-  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)

-

-  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this

-  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted

-  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in

-  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this

-  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting

-  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in

-  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

-  software without specific, written prior permission.

-

-  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this

-  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability

-  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any

-  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages

-  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether

-  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,

-  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of

-  this software.

-*/

-

-/** \file

- *

- *  Header file for AndroidAccessoryCommands.c.

- */

-

-#ifndef _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_

-#define _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_

-

-	/* Includes: */

-		#include <stdint.h>

-		#include <stdbool.h>

-

-		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>

-

-	/* Enums: */

-		enum Android_Requests_t

-		{

-			ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol    = 51,

-			ANDROID_Req_SendString              = 52,

-			ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode      = 53,

-		};

-

-		enum Android_Strings_t

-		{

-			ANDROID_STRING_Manufacturer         = 0,

-			ANDROID_STRING_Model                = 1,

-			ANDROID_STRING_Description          = 2,

-			ANDROID_STRING_Version              = 3,

-			ANDROID_STRING_URI                  = 4,

-			ANDROID_STRING_Serial               = 5,

-		};

-		

-		enum Android_Protocols_t

-		{

-			ANDROID_PROTOCOL_Accessory          = 0x0001,

-		};

-	

-	/* Function Prototypes: */

-		uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol);

-		uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,

-		                           char* String);

-		uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void);	

-	

-#endif

+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2011.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2011  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AndroidAccessoryCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _ANDROID_ACCESSORY_COMMANDS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdint.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		enum Android_Requests_t
+		{
+			ANDROID_Req_GetAccessoryProtocol    = 51,
+			ANDROID_Req_SendString              = 52,
+			ANDROID_Req_StartAccessoryMode      = 53,
+		};
+
+		enum Android_Strings_t
+		{
+			ANDROID_STRING_Manufacturer         = 0,
+			ANDROID_STRING_Model                = 1,
+			ANDROID_STRING_Description          = 2,
+			ANDROID_STRING_Version              = 3,
+			ANDROID_STRING_URI                  = 4,
+			ANDROID_STRING_Serial               = 5,
+		};
+		
+		enum Android_Protocols_t
+		{
+			ANDROID_PROTOCOL_Accessory          = 0x0001,
+		};
+	
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t Android_GetAccessoryProtocol(uint16_t* const Protocol);
+		uint8_t Android_SendString(const uint8_t StringIndex,
+		                           char* String);
+		uint8_t Android_StartAccessoryMode(void);	
+	
+#endif